blob: d181dab8c3dd5db32a9d3d3e0195ed72bacd5c59 [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
10|* This header provides a public inferface to a Clang library for extracting *|
11|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
Benjamin Kramer2f5db8b2014-08-13 16:25:19 +000016#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000018
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 31
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
84 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
85 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000086typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000087
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000088/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000089 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
90 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000091 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000092typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000093
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +000094/**
95 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
96 *
97 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
98 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
99 * yet been saved to disk.
100 */
101struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000102 /**
103 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000104 *
105 * This file must already exist in the file system.
106 */
107 const char *Filename;
108
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000109 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000110 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000111 */
112 const char *Contents;
113
114 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000115 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000116 */
117 unsigned long Length;
118};
119
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000120/**
121 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
122 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
123 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
124 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000125enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126 /**
127 * \brief The entity is available.
128 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000129 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000130 /**
131 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
132 * not recommended).
133 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000134 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000135 /**
136 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
137 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000138 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
139 /**
140 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
141 * an error.
142 */
143 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000144};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000145
146/**
147 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
148 */
149typedef struct CXVersion {
150 /**
151 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
152 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
153 */
154 int Major;
155 /**
156 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
157 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
158 * version '10'.
159 */
160 int Minor;
161 /**
162 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
164 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
165 */
166 int Subminor;
167} CXVersion;
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000168
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000170 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
171 *
172 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000173 *
174 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
175 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000176 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000177 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
178 * will be enumerated.
179 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000180 * Here is an example:
181 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000182 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000183 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
184 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000185 *
186 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
187 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
188 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
189 *
190 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000191 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000192 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000193 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
194 *
195 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
196 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000197 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
198 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
199 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000200 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
201 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000202 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000203 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000204 *
205 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
206 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
207 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000208 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
210 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000211
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000212/**
213 * \brief Destroy the given index.
214 *
215 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
216 * within that index have been destroyed.
217 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000219
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000220typedef enum {
221 /**
222 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
223 */
224 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
225
226 /**
227 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
228 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 *
230 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
231 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000232 */
233 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
234
235 /**
236 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
237 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000238 *
239 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
240 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000241 */
242 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
243
244 /**
245 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
246 * background priority.
247 */
248 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
249 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
250 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
251
252} CXGlobalOptFlags;
253
254/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000255 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000256 *
257 * For example:
258 * \code
259 * CXIndex idx = ...;
260 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
261 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
262 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
263 * \endcode
264 *
265 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
266 */
267CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
268
269/**
270 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
271 *
272 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
273 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
274 */
275CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
276
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000277/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000278 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000279 *
280 * @{
281 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000282
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000283/**
284 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
285 */
286typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000287
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000288
289/**
290 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000291 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000292CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000293
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000294/**
295 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
296 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000297CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000298
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000299/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000300 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
301 * across an indexing session.
302 */
303typedef struct {
304 unsigned long long data[3];
305} CXFileUniqueID;
306
307/**
308 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
309 *
310 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
311 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
312 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
313 * otherwise returns 0.
314*/
315CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
316
317/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000318 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
319 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000320 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000321 */
322CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
323clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
324
325/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000326 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
327 *
328 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000329 *
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000330 * \param file_name the name of the file.
331 *
332 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
333 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
334 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000335CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000336 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000337
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000338/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac3997e2014-08-16 00:26:19 +0000339 * \brief Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
340 * or they are both NULL.
341 */
342CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
343
344/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000345 * @}
346 */
347
348/**
349 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
350 *
351 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
352 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
353 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
354 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
355 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
356 * specific location information from those data types.
357 *
358 * @{
359 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000360
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000361/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000362 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
363 * unit.
364 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000365 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000366 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000367 */
368typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000369 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000370 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000371} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000372
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000373/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000374 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000375 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000376 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
377 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000378 */
379typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000380 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000381 unsigned begin_int_data;
382 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000383} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000384
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000385/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000386 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
387 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000388CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000389
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000390/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000391 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000392 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000393 * code.
394 *
395 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
396 * if they refer to different locations.
397 */
398CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
399 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000400
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000401/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000402 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
403 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000404 */
405CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
406 CXFile file,
407 unsigned line,
408 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000409/**
410 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
411 * in a particular translation unit.
412 */
413CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
414 CXFile file,
415 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000416
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000417/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000418 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
419 */
420CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
421
422/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000423 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
424 * the corresponding translation unit.
425 */
426CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
427
428/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000429 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
430 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000431CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000432
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000433/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000434 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
435 * locations.
436 */
437CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
438 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000439
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000440/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000441 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
442 *
443 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
444 */
445CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
446 CXSourceRange range2);
447
448/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000449 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000450 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000451CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000452
453/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000454 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
455 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000456 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000457 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
458 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000459 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000460 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
461 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000462 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000463 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000464 * source location points.
465 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000466 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000467 * source location points.
468 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000469 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
470 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000471 *
472 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
473 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000474 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000475CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
476 CXFile *file,
477 unsigned *line,
478 unsigned *column,
479 unsigned *offset);
480
481/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000482 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
483 * the given source location, as specified in a # line directive.
484 *
485 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
486 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000487 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000488 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
489 *
490 * static int func(void)
491 * {
492 * return 0;
493 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000494 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000495 *
496 * the location information returned by this function would be
497 *
498 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
499 *
500 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
501 *
502 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
503 *
504 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
505 * into its parts.
506 *
507 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
508 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
509 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
510 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
511 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
512 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
513 * source location, an empty string is returned.
514 *
515 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
516 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
517 *
518 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
519 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
520 */
521CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
522 CXString *filename,
523 unsigned *line,
524 unsigned *column);
525
526/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000527 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
528 * by the given source location.
529 *
530 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000531 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000532 * details.
533 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000534CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
535 CXFile *file,
536 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000537 unsigned *column,
538 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000539
540/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000541 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
542 * the given source location.
543 *
544 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
545 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
546 *
547 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
548 * into its parts.
549 *
550 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
551 * source location points.
552 *
553 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
554 * source location points.
555 *
556 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
557 * source location points.
558 *
559 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
560 * buffer to which the given source location points.
561 */
562CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
563 CXFile *file,
564 unsigned *line,
565 unsigned *column,
566 unsigned *offset);
567
568/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000569 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
570 * the given source location.
571 *
572 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
573 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
574 * a macro argument.
575 *
576 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
577 * into its parts.
578 *
579 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
580 * source location points.
581 *
582 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
583 * source location points.
584 *
585 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
586 * source location points.
587 *
588 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
589 * buffer to which the given source location points.
590 */
591CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
592 CXFile *file,
593 unsigned *line,
594 unsigned *column,
595 unsigned *offset);
596
597/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000598 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
599 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000600 */
601CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
602
603/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000604 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
605 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000606 */
607CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
608
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000609/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000610 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000611 */
612typedef struct {
613 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
614 unsigned count;
615 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000616 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000617 */
618 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000619} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000620
621/**
622 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000623 *
624 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
625 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000626 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000627CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
628 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000629
630/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000631 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000632 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000633CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000634
635/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000636 * @}
637 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000638
639/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000640 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
641 *
642 * @{
643 */
644
645/**
646 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
647 */
648enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
649 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000650 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000651 * option.
652 */
653 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000654
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000655 /**
656 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
657 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
658 */
659 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
660
661 /**
662 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
663 * wrong.
664 */
665 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
666
667 /**
668 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
669 */
670 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
671
672 /**
673 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
674 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
675 * results.
676 */
677 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
678};
679
680/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000681 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
682 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
683 */
684typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
685
686/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000687 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
688 */
689typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
690
691/**
692 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
693 */
694CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
695
696/**
697 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
698 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000699 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000700 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
701 *
702 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
703 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
704 */
705CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
706 unsigned Index);
707
708
709/**
710 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
711 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
712 */
713enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
714 /**
715 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
716 */
717 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
718
719 /**
720 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
721 * deserialize diagnostics.
722 */
723 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
724
725 /**
726 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
727 * could not be opened.
728 */
729 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
730
731 /**
732 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000733 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000734 */
735 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
736};
737
738/**
739 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000740 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000741 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000742 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
743 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000744 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000745 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000746 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
747 *
748 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000749 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000750 */
751CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
752 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
753 CXString *errorString);
754
755/**
756 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
757 */
758CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
759
760/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000761 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
762 *
763 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000764 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000765 */
766CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
767
768/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000769 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
770 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000771 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000772CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
773
774/**
775 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
776 *
777 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
778 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
779 *
780 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
781 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
782 */
783CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
784 unsigned Index);
785
786/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000787 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
788 * translation unit.
789 *
790 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
791 */
792CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
793 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
794
795/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000796 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
797 */
798CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000799
800/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000801 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
802 *
803 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000804 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000805 */
806enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
807 /**
808 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
809 * diagnostic was located.
810 *
811 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
812 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
813 *
814 * \code
815 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
816 * \endcode
817 *
818 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
819 */
820 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
821
822 /**
823 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
824 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
825 *
826 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
827 */
828 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
829
830 /**
831 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
832 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
833 * machine-parsable format.
834 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000835 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000836 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
837 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000838 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
839
840 /**
841 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
842 *
843 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
844 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
845 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
846 */
847 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
848
849 /**
850 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
851 *
852 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
853 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
854 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
855 */
856 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
857
858 /**
859 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
860 *
861 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
862 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
863 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
864 */
865 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000866};
867
868/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000869 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000870 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000871 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000872 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
873 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000874 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
875 *
876 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
877 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000878 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000879 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000880 *
881 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000882 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000883CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
884 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000885
886/**
887 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
888 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
889 *
890 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000891 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000892 */
893CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
894
895/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000896 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
897 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000898CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000899clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
900
901/**
902 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
903 *
904 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
905 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
906 */
907CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
908
909/**
910 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
911 */
912CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000913
914/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000915 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
916 * diagnostic.
917 *
918 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
919 *
920 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
921 * diagnostic (if any).
922 *
923 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
924 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
925 */
926CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
927 CXString *Disable);
928
929/**
930 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
931 *
932 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
933 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
934 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
935 *
936 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
937 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
938 */
939CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
940
941/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000942 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
943 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
944 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000945 *
946 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
947 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
948 *
949 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
950 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000951CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
952CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
953
954/**
955 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
956 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000957 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
958 */
959CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000960
961/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000962 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
963 * diagnostic.
964 */
965CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000966
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000967/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000968 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000969 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000970 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000971 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000972 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000973 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000974 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000975 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000976 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000977 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000978 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000979 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000980CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000981 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000982
983/**
984 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
985 * given diagnostic.
986 */
987CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
988
989/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000990 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000991 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000992 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
993 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
994 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
995 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
996 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
997 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
998 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
999 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
1000 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001001 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001002 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
1003 *
1004 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
1005 *
1006 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1007 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1008 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1009 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1010 *
1011 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1012 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001013 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001014CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001015 unsigned FixIt,
1016 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001017
1018/**
1019 * @}
1020 */
1021
1022/**
1023 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1024 *
1025 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1026 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1027 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1028 *
1029 * @{
1030 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001031
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001032/**
1033 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1034 */
1035CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1036clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1037
1038/**
1039 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1040 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1041 *
1042 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1043 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1044 * specified command line arguments.
1045 *
1046 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1047 * are ignored:
1048 *
1049 * '-c'
1050 * '-emit-ast'
1051 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001052 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001053 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001054 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1055 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001056 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001057 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001058 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1059 *
1060 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1061 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1062 *
1063 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1064 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1065 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1066 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001067 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001068 *
1069 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1070 * unsaved_files.
1071 *
1072 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1073 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001074 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1075 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1076 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001077 */
1078CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1079 CXIndex CIdx,
1080 const char *source_filename,
1081 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001082 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001083 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001084 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001085
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001086/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001087 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1088 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1089 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1090 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001091 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001092CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1093 CXIndex CIdx,
1094 const char *ast_filename);
1095
1096/**
1097 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1098 *
1099 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1100 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1101 *
1102 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1103 */
1104CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1105 CXIndex CIdx,
1106 const char *ast_filename,
1107 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001108
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001109/**
1110 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1111 *
1112 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1113 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1114 * constructing the translation unit.
1115 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001116enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1117 /**
1118 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1119 * needed.
1120 */
1121 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1122
1123 /**
1124 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1125 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1126 *
1127 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1128 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1129 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1130 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1131 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1132 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001133 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1134
1135 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001136 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001137 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001138 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1139 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1140 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1141 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1142 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1143 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1144 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001145 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001146 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001147
1148 /**
1149 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1150 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1151 *
1152 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1153 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1154 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1155 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1156 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1157 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1158 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1159 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1160 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1161 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001162 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1163
1164 /**
1165 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1166 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1167 *
1168 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1169 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1170 * code-completion operations.
1171 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001172 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001173
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001174 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001175 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1176 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001177 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001178 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1179 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001180 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001181 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001182
1183 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001184 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001185 *
1186 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001187 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001188 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001189 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1190
1191 /**
1192 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1193 * parsing.
1194 *
1195 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1196 * ignoring the usages.
1197 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001198 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1199
1200 /**
1201 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1202 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1203 * unit.
1204 */
1205 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001206};
1207
1208/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001209 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1210 * unit that is being edited.
1211 *
1212 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1213 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1214 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1215 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1216 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1217 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1218 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1219 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001220CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001221
1222/**
1223 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1224 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1225 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1226 * error codes.
1227 */
1228CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1229clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1230 const char *source_filename,
1231 const char *const *command_line_args,
1232 int num_command_line_args,
1233 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1234 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1235 unsigned options);
1236
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001237/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001238 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1239 * to that file.
1240 *
1241 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1242 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1243 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1244 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1245 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1246 *
1247 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1248 * associated.
1249 *
1250 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001251 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001252 *
1253 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1254 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1255 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1256 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001257 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001258 *
1259 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001260 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001261 *
1262 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001263 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001264 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1265 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1266 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1267 *
1268 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1269 * unsaved_files.
1270 *
1271 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1272 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1273 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1274 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001275 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1276 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1277 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1278 *
1279 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001280 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001281CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1282clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1283 const char *source_filename,
1284 const char *const *command_line_args,
1285 int num_command_line_args,
1286 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1287 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1288 unsigned options,
1289 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1290
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001291/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00001292 * \brief Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line
1293 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
1294 * library paths are relative to the binary.
1295 */
1296CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv(
1297 CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
1298 const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
1299 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1300 unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1301
1302/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001303 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1304 *
1305 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1306 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1307 * saving the translation unit.
1308 */
1309enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1310 /**
1311 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1312 */
1313 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1314};
1315
1316/**
1317 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1318 * unit.
1319 *
1320 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1321 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1322 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1323 * the most commonly-requested data.
1324 */
1325CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1326
1327/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001328 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1329 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1330 */
1331enum CXSaveError {
1332 /**
1333 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1334 */
1335 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1336
1337 /**
1338 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1339 * the file.
1340 *
1341 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1342 * write the file.
1343 */
1344 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1345
1346 /**
1347 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1348 * to save the translation unit.
1349 *
1350 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1351 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1352 */
1353 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1354
1355 /**
1356 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1357 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1358 */
1359 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1360};
1361
1362/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001363 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1364 * that translation unit on disk.
1365 *
1366 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1367 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1368 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1369 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1370 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1371 * units.
1372 *
1373 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001374 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001375 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1376 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001377 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1378 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1379 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1380 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001381 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1382 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1383 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001384 */
1385CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001386 const char *FileName,
1387 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001388
1389/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001390 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1391 */
1392CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001393
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001394/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001395 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1396 *
1397 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1398 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1399 * reparsing the translation unit.
1400 */
1401enum CXReparse_Flags {
1402 /**
1403 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1404 */
1405 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1406};
1407
1408/**
1409 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1410 * unit.
1411 *
1412 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1413 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1414 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1415 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1416 * to the next.
1417 */
1418CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1419
1420/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001421 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1422 *
1423 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1424 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1425 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1426 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1427 * was originally parsed.
1428 *
1429 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1430 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1431 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1432 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1433 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1434 * unit using this routine.
1435 *
1436 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1437 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1438 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1439 *
1440 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1441 * unsaved_files.
1442 *
1443 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1444 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1445 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1446 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1447 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1448 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001449 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1450 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1451 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1452 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001453 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001454 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001455 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1456 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1457 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001458 */
1459CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1460 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001461 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1462 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001463
1464/**
1465 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1466 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001467enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1468 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1469 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1470 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1471 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001472 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001473 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001474 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001475 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1476 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1477 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001478 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1479 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001480 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001481 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001482 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1483 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001484 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001485
1486 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001487 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001488};
1489
1490/**
1491 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001492 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001493 */
1494CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001495const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001496
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001497typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001498 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001499 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1500 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1501 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001502 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001503} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001504
1505/**
1506 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1507 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001508typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001509 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1510 void *data;
1511
1512 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1513 unsigned numEntries;
1514
1515 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1516 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001517 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001518
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001519} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001520
1521/**
1522 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001523 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001524 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001525CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001526
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001527CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001528
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001529/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001530 * @}
1531 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001532
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001533/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001534 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1535 */
1536enum CXCursorKind {
1537 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001538 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001539 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001540 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001541 *
1542 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1543 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1544 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1545 * of the declaration is not reported.
1546 */
1547 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1548 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001549 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001550 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1551 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1552 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1553 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1554 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1555 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001556 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001557 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1558 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1559 */
1560 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1561 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1562 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1563 /** \brief A function. */
1564 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1565 /** \brief A variable. */
1566 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1567 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1568 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001569 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001570 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001571 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001572 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001573 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001574 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001575 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001576 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1577 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1578 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1579 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1580 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1581 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1582 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001583 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001584 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001585 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001586 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
Saleem Abdulrasool993b2862015-08-12 03:21:44 +00001587 /** \brief A typedef. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001588 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001589 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1590 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001591 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1592 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001593 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1594 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001595 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1596 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1597 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1598 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1599 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1600 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001601 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1602 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1603 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1604 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1605 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1606 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1607 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1608 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001609 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1610 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001611 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1612 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001613 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1614 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001615 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1616 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001617 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001618 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001619 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1620 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001621 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001622 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001623 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001624 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001625 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1626 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001627
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001628 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001629 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001630
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001631 /* References */
1632 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001633 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001634 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1635 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1636 /**
1637 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1638 *
1639 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1640 * declared. For example, given:
1641 *
1642 * \code
1643 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1644 * size_type size;
1645 * \endcode
1646 *
1647 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1648 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1649 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1650 */
1651 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001652 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001653 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001654 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1655 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001656 */
1657 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001658 /**
1659 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1660 */
1661 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001662 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001663 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1664 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001665 */
1666 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001667 /**
1668 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1669 *
1670 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1671 * goto statement in the following example:
1672 *
1673 * \code
1674 * start_over:
1675 * ++counter;
1676 *
1677 * goto start_over;
1678 * \endcode
1679 *
1680 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1681 */
1682 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1683
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001684 /**
1685 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1686 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1687 *
1688 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1689 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1690 *
1691 * \code
1692 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1693 *
1694 * struct X { ... };
1695 * void swap(X&, X&);
1696 *
1697 * template<typename T>
1698 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1699 * while (first < last - 1) {
1700 * swap(*first, *--last);
1701 * ++first;
1702 * }
1703 * }
1704 *
1705 * struct Y { };
1706 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1707 * \endcode
1708 *
1709 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1710 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1711 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1712 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1713 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1714 * example).
1715 *
1716 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1717 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1718 * referenced by this cursor.
1719 */
1720 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1721
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001722 /**
1723 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1724 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1725 */
1726 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1727
1728 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001729
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001730 /* Error conditions */
1731 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1732 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1733 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1734 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001735 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1736 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001737
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001738 /* Expressions */
1739 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001740
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001741 /**
1742 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001743 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001744 *
1745 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1746 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1747 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1748 * expression is not reported.
1749 */
1750 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001751
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001752 /**
1753 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001754 * as a function, variable, or enumerator.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001755 */
1756 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001757
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001758 /**
1759 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1760 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1761 */
1762 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001763
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001764 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1765 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001766
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001767 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1768 object or class. */
1769 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001770
1771 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1772 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1773
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001774 /** \brief An integer literal.
1775 */
1776 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1777
1778 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1779 */
1780 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1781
1782 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1783 */
1784 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1785
1786 /** \brief A string literal.
1787 */
1788 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1789
1790 /** \brief A character literal.
1791 */
1792 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1793
1794 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1795 *
1796 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1797 */
1798 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1799
1800 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1801 * alignof).
1802 */
1803 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1804
1805 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1806 */
1807 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1808
1809 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1810 * "x <= y".
1811 */
1812 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1813
1814 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1815 */
1816 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1817
1818 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1819 */
1820 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1821
1822 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1823 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1824 *
1825 * For example: (int)f.
1826 */
1827 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1828
1829 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1830 */
1831 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1832
1833 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1834 */
1835 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1836
1837 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1838 */
1839 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1840
1841 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1842 */
1843 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1844
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001845 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001846 */
1847 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1848
1849 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1850 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1851 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1852 *
1853 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1854 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1855 * match the size of a pointer).
1856 */
1857 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1858
1859 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1860 */
1861 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1862
1863 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1864 */
1865 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1866
1867 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1868 */
1869 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1870
1871 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
1872 */
1873 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
1874
1875 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
1876 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
1877 *
1878 * Example:
1879 * \code
1880 * x = int(0.5);
1881 * \endcode
1882 */
1883 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
1884
1885 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
1886 */
1887 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
1888
1889 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
1890 */
1891 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
1892
1893 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
1894 */
1895 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
1896
1897 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
1898 */
1899 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
1900
1901 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
1902 *
1903 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
1904 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
1905 */
1906 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
1907
1908 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
1909 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
1910 */
1911 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
1912
1913 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
1914 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
1915 */
1916 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
1917
1918 /** \brief A unary expression.
1919 */
1920 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
1921
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00001922 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001923 */
1924 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
1925
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001926 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001927 */
1928 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
1929
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001930 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001931 */
1932 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
1933
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001934 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001935 */
1936 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
1937
1938 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
1939 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
1940 *
1941 * \code
1942 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
1943 * \endcode
1944 */
1945 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
1946
1947 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
1948 * expressions.
1949 *
1950 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
1951 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
1952 *
1953 * \code
1954 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
1955 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
1956 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
1957 * }
1958 * \endcode
1959 */
1960 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
1961
1962 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
1963 * pack.
1964 *
1965 * \code
1966 * template<typename ...Types>
1967 * struct count {
1968 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
1969 * };
1970 * \endcode
1971 */
1972 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
1973
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001974 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
1975 * object.
1976 *
1977 * \code
1978 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
1979 * std::sort(x, x + N,
1980 * [](float a, float b) {
1981 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
1982 * });
1983 * }
1984 * \endcode
1985 */
1986 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
1987
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00001988 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
1989 */
1990 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
1991
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001992 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00001993 */
1994 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
1995
Alexey Bataev1a3320e2015-08-25 14:24:04 +00001996 /** \brief OpenMP 4.0 [2.4, Array Section].
1997 */
1998 CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
1999
2000 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002001
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002002 /* Statements */
2003 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
2004 /**
2005 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2006 * interface.
2007 *
2008 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
2009 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
2010 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
2011 * reported.
2012 */
2013 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00002014
2015 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
2016 *
2017 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
2018 * the following example:
2019 *
2020 * \code
2021 * start_over:
2022 * ++counter;
2023 * \endcode
2024 *
2025 */
2026 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002027
2028 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2029 *
2030 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2031 * bodies.
2032 */
2033 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2034
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002035 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002036 */
2037 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2038
2039 /** \brief A default statement.
2040 */
2041 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2042
2043 /** \brief An if statement
2044 */
2045 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2046
2047 /** \brief A switch statement.
2048 */
2049 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2050
2051 /** \brief A while statement.
2052 */
2053 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2054
2055 /** \brief A do statement.
2056 */
2057 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2058
2059 /** \brief A for statement.
2060 */
2061 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2062
2063 /** \brief A goto statement.
2064 */
2065 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2066
2067 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2068 */
2069 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2070
2071 /** \brief A continue statement.
2072 */
2073 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2074
2075 /** \brief A break statement.
2076 */
2077 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2078
2079 /** \brief A return statement.
2080 */
2081 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2082
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002083 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002084 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002085 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002086 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002087
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002088 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002089 */
2090 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2091
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002092 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002093 */
2094 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2095
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002096 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002097 */
2098 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2099
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002100 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002101 */
2102 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2103
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002104 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002105 */
2106 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2107
2108 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2109 */
2110 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2111
2112 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2113 */
2114 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2115
2116 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2117 */
2118 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2119
2120 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2121 */
2122 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2123
2124 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2125 */
2126 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2127
2128 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2129 */
2130 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2131
2132 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2133 */
2134 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2135
2136 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2137 */
2138 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2139
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002140 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2141 */
2142 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2143
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002144 /** \brief The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002145 *
2146 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2147 */
2148 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2149
2150 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2151 * expressions.
2152 */
2153 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2154
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002155 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2156 */
2157 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2158
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002159 /** \brief OpenMP SIMD directive.
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002160 */
2161 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2162
Alexey Bataevf29276e2014-06-18 04:14:57 +00002163 /** \brief OpenMP for directive.
2164 */
2165 CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
2166
Alexey Bataevd3f8dd22014-06-25 11:44:49 +00002167 /** \brief OpenMP sections directive.
2168 */
2169 CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
2170
Alexey Bataev1e0498a2014-06-26 08:21:58 +00002171 /** \brief OpenMP section directive.
2172 */
2173 CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
2174
Alexey Bataevd1e40fb2014-06-26 12:05:45 +00002175 /** \brief OpenMP single directive.
2176 */
2177 CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
2178
Alexey Bataev4acb8592014-07-07 13:01:15 +00002179 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for directive.
2180 */
2181 CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
2182
Alexey Bataev84d0b3e2014-07-08 08:12:03 +00002183 /** \brief OpenMP parallel sections directive.
2184 */
2185 CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
2186
Alexey Bataev9c2e8ee2014-07-11 11:25:16 +00002187 /** \brief OpenMP task directive.
2188 */
2189 CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
2190
Alexander Musman80c22892014-07-17 08:54:58 +00002191 /** \brief OpenMP master directive.
2192 */
2193 CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
2194
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002195 /** \brief OpenMP critical directive.
2196 */
2197 CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
2198
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002199 /** \brief OpenMP taskyield directive.
2200 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002201 CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002202
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002203 /** \brief OpenMP barrier directive.
2204 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002205 CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002206
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002207 /** \brief OpenMP taskwait directive.
2208 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002209 CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002210
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002211 /** \brief OpenMP flush directive.
2212 */
2213 CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002214
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002215 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
2216 */
2217 CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
2218
Alexey Bataev9fb6e642014-07-22 06:45:04 +00002219 /** \brief OpenMP ordered directive.
2220 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002221 CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002222
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002223 /** \brief OpenMP atomic directive.
2224 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002225 CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002226
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002227 /** \brief OpenMP for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmanf82886e2014-09-18 05:12:34 +00002228 */
2229 CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
2230
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002231 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002232 */
2233 CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
2234
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002235 /** \brief OpenMP target directive.
2236 */
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002237 CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002238
Alexey Bataev13314bf2014-10-09 04:18:56 +00002239 /** \brief OpenMP teams directive.
2240 */
2241 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
2242
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002243 /** \brief OpenMP taskgroup directive.
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002244 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002245 CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002246
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002247 /** \brief OpenMP cancellation point directive.
2248 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002249 CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002250
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002251 /** \brief OpenMP cancel directive.
2252 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002253 CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002254
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002255 /** \brief OpenMP target data directive.
2256 */
2257 CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
2258
2259 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002260
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002261 /**
2262 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2263 *
2264 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2265 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2266 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002267 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2268
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002269 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002270 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2271 /**
2272 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2273 * interface.
2274 */
2275 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2276
2277 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2278 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002279 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002280 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2281 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002282 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002283 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002284 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
Joey Gouly81228382014-05-01 15:41:58 +00002285 CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
2286 CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
2287 CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002288 CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
2289 CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
2290 CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
2291 CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
Eli Bendersky9b071472014-08-08 14:59:00 +00002292 CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +00002293 CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
2294 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_VisibilityAttr,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002295
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002296 /* Preprocessing */
2297 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002298 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002299 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2300 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002301 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002302 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002303 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2304
2305 /* Extra Declarations */
2306 /**
2307 * \brief A module import declaration.
2308 */
2309 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002310 CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002311 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002312 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl,
Francisco Lopes da Silva975a9f62015-01-21 16:24:11 +00002313
2314 /**
2315 * \brief A code completion overload candidate.
2316 */
2317 CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002318};
2319
2320/**
2321 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2322 * a translation unit.
2323 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002324 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002325 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2326 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2327 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2328 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2329 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2330 *
2331 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2332 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2333 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2334 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2335 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2336 * source code into the AST.
2337 */
2338typedef struct {
2339 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002340 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002341 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002342} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002343
2344/**
2345 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2346 *
2347 * @{
2348 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002349
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002350/**
2351 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2352 */
2353CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002354
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002355/**
2356 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2357 *
2358 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2359 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2360 */
2361CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2362
2363/**
2364 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2365 */
2366CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002367
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002368/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002369 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002370 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002371CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002372
2373/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002374 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2375 */
2376CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2377
2378/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002379 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2380 */
2381CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2382
2383/**
2384 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2385 */
2386CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2387
2388/**
2389 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2390 * reference.
2391 *
2392 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2393 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2394 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2395 */
2396CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2397
2398/**
2399 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2400 */
2401CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2402
2403/**
2404 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2405 */
2406CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2407
2408/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002409 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2410 */
2411CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2412
2413/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002414 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002415 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002416 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002417CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2418
2419/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002420 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2421 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002422 */
2423CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002424
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002425/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002426 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2427 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2428 */
2429CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2430
2431/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002432 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2433 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2434 */
2435CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2436
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002437/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002438 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2439 */
2440enum CXLinkageKind {
2441 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2442 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2443 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2444 /**
2445 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2446 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2447 */
2448 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2449 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2450 CXLinkage_Internal,
2451 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2452 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2453 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2454 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2455 CXLinkage_External
2456};
2457
2458/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002459 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002460 */
2461CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2462
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002463enum CXVisibilityKind {
2464 /** \brief This value indicates that no visibility information is available
2465 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2466 CXVisibility_Invalid,
2467
2468 /** \brief Symbol not seen by the linker. */
2469 CXVisibility_Hidden,
2470 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */
2471 CXVisibility_Protected,
2472 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */
Chad Rosierc6bb4242015-11-23 21:05:04 +00002473 CXVisibility_Default
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002474};
2475
NAKAMURA Takumia70cdf52015-11-23 22:51:26 +00002476/**
2477 * \brief Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2478 *
2479 * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by
2480 * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by
2481 * commandline arguments.
2482 *
2483 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2484 *
2485 * \returns The visibility of the cursor.
2486 */
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002487CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor);
2488
2489/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002490 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2491 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002492 *
2493 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2494 *
2495 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2496 */
2497CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2498clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2499
2500/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002501 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2502 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2503 */
2504typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2505 /**
2506 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2507 * provides availability information.
2508 *
2509 * Possible values are "ios" or "macosx".
2510 */
2511 CXString Platform;
2512 /**
2513 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2514 */
2515 CXVersion Introduced;
2516 /**
2517 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2518 * still available).
2519 */
2520 CXVersion Deprecated;
2521 /**
2522 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2523 * is no longer available.
2524 */
2525 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2526 /**
2527 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2528 */
2529 int Unavailable;
2530 /**
2531 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2532 * suggest replacement APIs.
2533 */
2534 CXString Message;
2535} CXPlatformAvailability;
2536
2537/**
2538 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2539 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2540 *
2541 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2542 *
2543 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2544 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2545 *
2546 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2547 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2548 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2549 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002550 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002551 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2552 *
2553 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2554 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2555 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2556 *
2557 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2558 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2559 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2560 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2561 *
2562 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2563 * \c availability array.
2564 *
2565 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2566 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2567 *
2568 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2569 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2570 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2571 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2572 */
2573CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2574clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2575 int *always_deprecated,
2576 CXString *deprecated_message,
2577 int *always_unavailable,
2578 CXString *unavailable_message,
2579 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2580 int availability_size);
2581
2582/**
2583 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2584 */
2585CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2586clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2587
2588/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002589 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2590 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002591enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002592 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002593 CXLanguage_C,
2594 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002595 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002596};
2597
2598/**
2599 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2600 */
2601CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2602
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002603/**
2604 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2605 */
2606CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2607
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002608
2609/**
2610 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2611 */
2612typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2613
2614/**
2615 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2616 */
2617CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2618
2619/**
2620 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2621 */
2622CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2623
2624/**
2625 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2626 *
2627 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2628*/
2629CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2630 CXCursor cursor);
2631
2632/**
2633 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2634 *
2635 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2636*/
2637CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2638 CXCursor cursor);
2639
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002640/**
2641 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2642 *
2643 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2644 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2645 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2646 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2647 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2648 *
2649 * \code
2650 * class C {
2651 * void f();
2652 * };
2653 *
2654 * void C::f() { }
2655 * \endcode
2656 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002657 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002658 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2659 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002660 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002661 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2662 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2663 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2664 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2665 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2666 *
2667 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2668 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2669 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002670 *
2671 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002672 */
2673CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2674
2675/**
2676 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2677 *
2678 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2679 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2680 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2681 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2682 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2683 *
2684 * \code
2685 * class C {
2686 * void f();
2687 * };
2688 *
2689 * void C::f() { }
2690 * \endcode
2691 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002692 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002693 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2694 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002695 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002696 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2697 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2698 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2699 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2700 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2701 *
2702 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2703 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2704 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002705 *
2706 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2707 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002708 */
2709CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002710
2711/**
2712 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2713 * method.
2714 *
2715 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2716 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2717 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002718 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2719 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2720 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2721 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2722 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2723 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002724 *
2725 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2726 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2727 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2728 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2729 * base classes.
2730 *
2731 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2732 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2733 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2734 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2735 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2736 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2737 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2738 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2739 *
2740 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2741 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2742 * method overrides.
2743 *
2744 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2745 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2746 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2747 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2748 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2749 *
2750 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2751 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2752 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2753 */
2754CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2755 CXCursor **overridden,
2756 unsigned *num_overridden);
2757
2758/**
2759 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2760 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2761 */
2762CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2763
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002764/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002765 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
2766 * cursor.
2767 */
2768CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
2769
2770/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002771 * @}
2772 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002773
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002774/**
2775 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
2776 *
2777 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
2778 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
2779 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
2780 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
2781 *
2782 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00002783 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002784
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002785/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002786 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
2787 * location in the source code.
2788 *
2789 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
2790 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002791 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002792 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002793 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002794 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
2795 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
2796 *
2797 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
2798 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002799 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002800CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002801
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002802/**
2803 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
2804 * by the given cursor.
2805 *
2806 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002807 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
2808 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
2809 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002810 * source code.
2811 */
2812CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002813
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00002814/**
2815 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002816 * the given cursor.
2817 *
2818 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
2819 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002820 * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002821 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
2822 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
2823 * entity was actually used).
2824 */
2825CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00002826
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002827/**
2828 * @}
2829 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00002830
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002831/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002832 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
2833 *
2834 * @{
2835 */
2836
2837/**
2838 * \brief Describes the kind of type
2839 */
2840enum CXTypeKind {
2841 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002842 * \brief Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002843 */
2844 CXType_Invalid = 0,
2845
2846 /**
2847 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2848 * interface.
2849 */
2850 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
2851
2852 /* Builtin types */
2853 CXType_Void = 2,
2854 CXType_Bool = 3,
2855 CXType_Char_U = 4,
2856 CXType_UChar = 5,
2857 CXType_Char16 = 6,
2858 CXType_Char32 = 7,
2859 CXType_UShort = 8,
2860 CXType_UInt = 9,
2861 CXType_ULong = 10,
2862 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
2863 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
2864 CXType_Char_S = 13,
2865 CXType_SChar = 14,
2866 CXType_WChar = 15,
2867 CXType_Short = 16,
2868 CXType_Int = 17,
2869 CXType_Long = 18,
2870 CXType_LongLong = 19,
2871 CXType_Int128 = 20,
2872 CXType_Float = 21,
2873 CXType_Double = 22,
2874 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
2875 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
2876 CXType_Overload = 25,
2877 CXType_Dependent = 26,
2878 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
2879 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
2880 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
2881 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
2882 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_ObjCSel,
2883
2884 CXType_Complex = 100,
2885 CXType_Pointer = 101,
2886 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
2887 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
2888 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
2889 CXType_Record = 105,
2890 CXType_Enum = 106,
2891 CXType_Typedef = 107,
2892 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00002893 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
2894 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002895 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002896 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00002897 CXType_Vector = 113,
2898 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
2899 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00002900 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
Sergey Kalinichevc0151202015-11-15 13:10:10 +00002901 CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
2902 CXType_Auto = 118
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002903};
2904
2905/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002906 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
2907 */
2908enum CXCallingConv {
2909 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
2910 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
2911 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
2912 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
2913 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
2914 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
2915 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
2916 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Derek Schuff3970a7e2015-01-28 20:24:52 +00002917 /* Value 8 was PnaclCall, but it was never used, so it could safely be re-used. */
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00002918 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00002919 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = 10,
2920 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Reid Klecknerd7857f02014-10-24 17:42:17 +00002921 CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002922
2923 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
2924 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
2925};
2926
2927
2928/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002929 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
2930 *
2931 */
2932typedef struct {
2933 enum CXTypeKind kind;
2934 void *data[2];
2935} CXType;
2936
2937/**
2938 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
2939 */
2940CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
2941
2942/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00002943 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
2944 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
2945 *
2946 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
2947 */
2948CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
2949
2950/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002951 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
2952 *
2953 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
2954 * returned.
2955 */
2956CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
2957
2958/**
2959 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
2960 *
2961 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
2962 * returned.
2963 */
2964CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
2965
2966/**
2967 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
2968 * long long.
2969 *
2970 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
2971 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2972 * must be verified before calling this function.
2973 */
2974CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
2975
2976/**
2977 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
2978 * long long.
2979 *
2980 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
2981 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2982 * must be verified before calling this function.
2983 */
2984CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
2985
2986/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00002987 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
2988 *
2989 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
2990 */
2991CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
2992
2993/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002994 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
2995 * cursor.
2996 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00002997 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
2998 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002999 */
3000CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
3001
3002/**
3003 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
3004 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003005 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
3006 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
3007 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003008 */
3009CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
3010
3011/**
Eli Benderskyc27a0c42014-10-10 20:01:05 +00003012 * \brief Describes the kind of a template argument.
3013 *
3014 * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
3015 * element descriptions.
3016 */
3017enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
3018 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
3019 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
3020 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
3021 CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
3022 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
3023 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
3024 CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
3025 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
3026 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
3027 /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
3028 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
3029};
3030
3031/**
3032 *\brief Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
3033 * template specialization.
3034 *
3035 * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
3036 * declaration, -1 is returned.
3037 *
3038 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3039 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3040 * void foo() { ... }
3041 *
3042 * template <>
3043 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3044 *
3045 * The value 3 would be returned from this call.
3046 */
3047CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
3048
3049/**
3050 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
3051 *
3052 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
3053 * template argument kind is returned.
3054 *
3055 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3056 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3057 * void foo() { ... }
3058 *
3059 * template <>
3060 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3061 *
3062 * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
3063 * respectively.
3064 */
3065CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(
3066 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3067
3068/**
3069 * \brief Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
3070 * function decl representing a template specialization.
3071 *
3072 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
3073 * template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
3074 * is returned.
3075 *
3076 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3077 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3078 * void foo() { ... }
3079 *
3080 * template <>
3081 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3082 *
3083 * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
3084 * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
3085 */
3086CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
3087 unsigned I);
3088
3089/**
3090 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3091 * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
3092 *
3093 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3094 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3095 *
3096 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3097 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3098 * void foo() { ... }
3099 *
3100 * template <>
3101 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3102 *
3103 * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
3104 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3105 */
3106CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
3107 unsigned I);
3108
3109/**
3110 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3111 * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
3112 *
3113 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3114 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3115 *
3116 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3117 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3118 * void foo() { ... }
3119 *
3120 * template <>
3121 * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
3122 *
3123 * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
3124 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3125 */
3126CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(
3127 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3128
3129/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003130 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003131 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003132 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
3133 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003134 */
3135CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
3136
3137/**
3138 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
3139 *
3140 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
3141 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
3142 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
3143 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
3144 */
3145CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
3146
3147/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003148 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
3149 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
3150 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003151 */
3152CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
3153
3154/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003155 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
3156 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
3157 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003158 */
3159CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
3160
3161/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003162 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
3163 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
3164 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003165 */
3166CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
3167
3168/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003169 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003170 */
3171CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
3172
3173/**
3174 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
3175 */
3176CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
3177
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00003178/**
3179 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
3180 */
3181CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003182
3183/**
3184 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
3185 */
3186CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
3187
3188/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003189 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
3190 *
3191 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
3192 */
3193CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
3194
3195/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003196 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003197 *
3198 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003199 */
3200CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
3201
3202/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003203 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003204 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003205 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003206 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003207 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003208CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003209
3210/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003211 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003212 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003213 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
3214 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003215 */
3216CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3217
3218/**
3219 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003220 */
3221CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
3222
3223/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003224 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003225 *
3226 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00003227 */
3228CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
3229
3230/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00003231 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
3232 * otherwise.
3233 */
3234CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
3235
3236/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003237 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
3238 *
3239 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
3240 * an invalid type is returned.
3241 */
3242CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
3243
3244/**
3245 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
3246 *
3247 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
3248 * -1 is returned.
3249 */
3250CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
3251
3252/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003253 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
3254 *
3255 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3256 */
3257CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
3258
3259/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00003260 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003261 *
3262 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
3263 */
3264CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
3265
3266/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003267 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
3268 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
3269 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3270 *
3271 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3272 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3273 */
3274enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3275 /**
3276 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3277 */
3278 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3279 /**
3280 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3281 */
3282 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3283 /**
3284 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3285 */
3286 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3287 /**
3288 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3289 */
3290 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3291 /**
3292 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3293 */
3294 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3295};
3296
3297/**
3298 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3299 * standard.
3300 *
3301 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3302 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3303 * is returned.
3304 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3305 * returned.
3306 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3307 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3308 */
3309CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3310
3311/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003312 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3313 *
3314 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3315 */
3316CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3317
3318/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003319 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3320 *
3321 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3322 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3323 * is returned.
3324 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3325 * returned.
3326 */
3327CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3328
3329/**
3330 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3331 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3332 *
3333 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3334 * is returned.
3335 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3336 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3337 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3338 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3339 * If the field's name S is not found,
3340 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3341 */
3342CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3343
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00003344/**
3345 * \brief Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
3346 *
3347 * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
3348 * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
3349 * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3350 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3351 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3352 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3353 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3354 * If the field's name S is not found,
3355 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3356 */
3357CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
3358
3359/**
3360 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
3361 * declaration.
3362 */
3363CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
3364
3365
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003366enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3367 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3368 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3369 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3370 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3371 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3372 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3373};
3374
3375/**
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003376 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given class template
3377 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a class template specialization.
3378 *
3379 * Variadic argument packs count as only one argument, and can not be inspected
3380 * further.
3381 */
3382CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3383
3384/**
3385 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3386 * at given index.
3387 *
3388 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3389 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3390 */
3391CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3392
3393/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003394 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3395 *
3396 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3397 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3398 */
3399CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3400
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003401/**
3402 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3403 * bitfield.
3404 */
3405CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3406
3407/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003408 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3409 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3410 */
3411CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3412
3413/**
3414 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3415 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3416 */
3417enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3418 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3419 CX_CXXPublic,
3420 CX_CXXProtected,
3421 CX_CXXPrivate
3422};
3423
3424/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003425 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003426 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003427 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3428 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3429 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003430 */
3431CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3432
3433/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003434 * \brief Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00003435 * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003436 */
3437enum CX_StorageClass {
3438 CX_SC_Invalid,
3439 CX_SC_None,
3440 CX_SC_Extern,
3441 CX_SC_Static,
3442 CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
3443 CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
3444 CX_SC_Auto,
3445 CX_SC_Register
3446};
3447
3448/**
3449 * \brief Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
3450 *
3451 * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
3452 * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
3453 */
3454CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
3455
3456/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003457 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3458 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3459 *
3460 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3461 *
3462 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3463 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3464 */
3465CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3466
3467/**
3468 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3469 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3470 *
3471 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3472 *
3473 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3474 * the cursor.
3475 *
3476 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3477 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3478 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3479 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3480 */
3481CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3482 unsigned index);
3483
3484/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003485 * @}
3486 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003487
3488/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003489 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003490 *
3491 * @{
3492 */
3493
3494
3495/**
3496 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3497 * this function returns the collection element type.
3498 *
3499 */
3500CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3501
3502/**
3503 * @}
3504 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003505
3506/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003507 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3508 *
3509 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3510 * using cursors.
3511 *
3512 * @{
3513 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003514
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003515/**
3516 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3517 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3518 *
3519 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3520 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3521 */
3522enum CXChildVisitResult {
3523 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003524 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003525 */
3526 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003527 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003528 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3529 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3530 */
3531 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3532 /**
3533 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3534 * the same visitor and client data.
3535 */
3536 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3537};
3538
3539/**
3540 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3541 *
3542 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3543 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3544 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3545 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3546 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3547 *
3548 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3549 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3550 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003551typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3552 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003553 CXClientData client_data);
3554
3555/**
3556 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3557 *
3558 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3559 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3560 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3561 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3562 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3563 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003564 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003565 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003566 * definition, have no children).
3567 *
3568 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3569 * child of \p parent.
3570 *
3571 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3572 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3573 *
3574 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3575 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3576 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003577CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003578 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3579 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003580#ifdef __has_feature
3581# if __has_feature(blocks)
3582/**
3583 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3584 *
3585 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3586 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3587 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3588 *
3589 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3590 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3591 */
3592typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3593 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3594
3595/**
3596 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3597 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3598 */
3599unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3600 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
3601# endif
3602#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003603
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003604/**
3605 * @}
3606 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003607
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003608/**
3609 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3610 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003611 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003612 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3613 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3614 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3615 *
3616 * @{
3617 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003618
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003619/**
3620 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3621 * by the given cursor.
3622 *
3623 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3624 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3625 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3626 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3627 */
3628CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3629
3630/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003631 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3632 */
3633CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3634
3635/**
3636 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3637 */
3638CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003639 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003640 const char *category_name);
3641
3642/**
3643 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3644 */
3645CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3646 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3647
3648
3649/**
3650 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
3651 * the USR for its containing class.
3652 */
3653CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
3654 CXString classUSR);
3655
3656/**
3657 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
3658 * the USR for its containing class.
3659 */
3660CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
3661 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
3662 CXString classUSR);
3663
3664/**
3665 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
3666 * for its containing class.
3667 */
3668CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
3669 CXString classUSR);
3670
3671/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003672 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3673 */
3674CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
3675
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003676/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003677 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
3678 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003679 * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
3680 * pieces for each selector identifier.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003681 *
3682 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
3683 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
3684 *
3685 * \param options Reserved.
3686 */
3687CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
3688 unsigned pieceIndex,
3689 unsigned options);
3690
3691/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003692 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3693 *
3694 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
3695 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
3696 * class template specialization.
3697 */
3698CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
3699
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003700/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
3701 * entity that it references.
3702 *
3703 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
3704 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003705 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003706 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
3707 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003708 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003709 */
3710CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003711
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003712/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003713 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
3714 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
3715 * that entity.
3716 *
3717 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
3718 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
3719 * definition. For example, given:
3720 *
3721 * \code
3722 * int f(int, int);
3723 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
3724 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
3725 * int f(int, int);
3726 * \endcode
3727 *
3728 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
3729 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
3730 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
3731 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
3732 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
3733 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
3734 * declaration).
3735 *
3736 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
3737 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
3738 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
3739 */
3740CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3741
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003742/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003743 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
3744 * is also a definition of that entity.
3745 */
3746CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3747
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003748/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003749 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
3750 *
3751 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
3752 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
3753 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
3754 *
3755 * \code
3756 * struct X;
3757 * struct X;
3758 * struct X {
3759 * int member;
3760 * };
3761 * \endcode
3762 *
3763 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
3764 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
3765 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
3766 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
3767 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
3768 * comparing their canonical cursors.
3769 *
3770 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
3771 */
3772CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
3773
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003774
3775/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003776 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
3777 * method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003778 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003779 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003780 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
3781 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003782 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003783 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
3784 * otherwise.
3785 */
3786CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
3787
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003788/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003789 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
3790 * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003791 *
3792 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003793 * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
3794 * or a specific class.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003795 *
3796 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
3797 * method/message, it will return zero.
3798 */
3799CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
3800
3801/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003802 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message, returns the CXType
3803 * of the receiver.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00003804 */
3805CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
3806
3807/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003808 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
3809 */
3810typedef enum {
3811 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
3812 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
3813 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
3814 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
3815 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
3816 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
3817 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
3818 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
3819 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
3820 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
3821 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
3822 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
3823 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800
3824} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
3825
3826/**
3827 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
3828 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
3829 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
3830 *
3831 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
3832 */
3833CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
3834 unsigned reserved);
3835
3836/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003837 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003838 * Objective-C method declarations.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003839 */
3840typedef enum {
3841 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
3842 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
3843 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
3844 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
3845 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
3846 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
3847 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
3848} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
3849
3850/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003851 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
3852 * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
3853 * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
3854 * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003855 */
3856CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
3857
3858/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003859 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
3860 * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "@optional".
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00003861 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "@required".
3862 */
3863CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
3864
3865/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00003866 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
3867 */
3868CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
3869
3870/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00003871 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3872 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
3873 * with whitespace in between.
3874 */
3875CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
3876
3877/**
3878 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3879 * comment text, including comment markers.
3880 */
3881CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
3882
3883/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003884 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
3885 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
3886 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00003887 */
3888CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
3889
3890/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003891 * @}
3892 */
3893
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003894/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
3895 *
3896 * @{
3897 */
3898
3899/**
3900 * \brief Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
3901 */
3902CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
3903
3904/**
Saleem Abdulrasool60034432015-11-12 03:57:22 +00003905 * \brief Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
3906 * constructor or destructor at the cursor.
3907 */
3908CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
3909
3910/**
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003911 * @}
3912 */
3913
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003914/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003915 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
3916 *
3917 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
3918 *
3919 * @{
3920 */
3921
3922typedef void *CXModule;
3923
3924/**
3925 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
3926 */
3927CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
3928
3929/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6d49c32014-05-14 23:14:37 +00003930 * \brief Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
3931 * exists.
3932 */
3933CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
3934
3935/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003936 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003937 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00003938 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
3939 */
3940CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
3941
3942/**
3943 * \param Module a module object.
3944 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003945 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
3946 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
3947 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003948CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003949
3950/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003951 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003952 *
3953 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
3954 * will return "vector".
3955 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003956CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003957
3958/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003959 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003960 *
3961 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
3962 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003963CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003964
3965/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003966 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003967 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis884337f2014-05-15 04:44:25 +00003968 * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
3969 */
3970CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
3971
3972/**
3973 * \param Module a module object.
3974 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003975 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
3976 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00003977CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
3978 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003979
3980/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003981 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003982 *
3983 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
3984 *
3985 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
3986 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003987CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00003988CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
3989 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003990
3991/**
3992 * @}
3993 */
3994
3995/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00003996 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
3997 *
3998 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
3999 * to C++ language features.
4000 *
4001 * @{
4002 */
4003
4004/**
Saleem Abdulrasool6ea75db2015-10-27 15:50:22 +00004005 * \brief Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
4006 */
4007CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
4008
4009/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00004010 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4011 * pure virtual.
4012 */
4013CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
4014
4015/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004016 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4017 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004018 */
4019CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
4020
4021/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00004022 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4023 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
4024 * one of the base classes.
4025 */
4026CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
4027
4028/**
Dmitri Gribenkoe570ede2014-04-07 14:59:13 +00004029 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4030 * declared 'const'.
4031 */
4032CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
4033
4034/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004035 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
4036 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4037 * the template.
4038 *
4039 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4040 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4041 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4042 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4043 *
4044 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4045 * declaration.
4046 *
4047 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4048 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4049 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4050 */
4051CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4052
4053/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004054 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4055 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4056 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4057 *
4058 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4059 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4060 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4061 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4062 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4063 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4064 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4065 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4066 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4067 *
4068 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4069 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4070 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4071 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4072 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4073 *
4074 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4075 * of a template.
4076 *
4077 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4078 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4079 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4080 */
4081CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004082
4083/**
4084 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4085 * covering that reference.
4086 *
4087 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4088 * an operator call.
4089 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4090 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4091 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4092 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4093 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4094 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004095 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004096 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4097 *
4098 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4099 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4100 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004101CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4102 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004103 unsigned PieceIndex);
4104
4105enum CXNameRefFlags {
4106 /**
4107 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4108 * range.
4109 */
4110 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4111
4112 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004113 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4114 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004115 */
4116 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4117
4118 /**
4119 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4120 *
4121 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4122 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4123 * \code
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004124 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004125 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4126 * \endcode
4127 */
4128 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4129};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004130
4131/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004132 * @}
4133 */
4134
4135/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004136 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4137 *
4138 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4139 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4140 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004141 *
4142 * @{
4143 */
4144
4145/**
4146 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4147 */
4148typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4149 /**
4150 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4151 */
4152 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004153
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004154 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004155 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004156 */
4157 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004158
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004159 /**
4160 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4161 */
4162 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004163
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004164 /**
4165 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4166 */
4167 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004168
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004169 /**
4170 * \brief A comment.
4171 */
4172 CXToken_Comment
4173} CXTokenKind;
4174
4175/**
4176 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4177 */
4178typedef struct {
4179 unsigned int_data[4];
4180 void *ptr_data;
4181} CXToken;
4182
4183/**
4184 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4185 */
4186CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004187
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004188/**
4189 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4190 *
4191 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4192 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4193 */
4194CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004195
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004196/**
4197 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4198 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004199CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004200 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004201
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004202/**
4203 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4204 */
4205CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4206
4207/**
4208 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4209 * lexical tokens.
4210 *
4211 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4212 *
4213 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4214 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4215 *
4216 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4217 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4218 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4219 *
4220 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4221 * array.
4222 *
4223 */
4224CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4225 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004226
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004227/**
4228 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4229 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4230 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004231 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4232 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4233 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4234 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4235 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4236 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4237 *
4238 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4239 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4240 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4241 *
4242 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4243 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4244 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4245 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4246 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004247 *
4248 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4249 *
4250 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4251 *
4252 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4253 *
4254 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4255 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4256 */
4257CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4258 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4259 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004260
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004261/**
4262 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4263 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004264CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004265 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004266
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004267/**
4268 * @}
4269 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004270
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004271/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004272 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4273 *
4274 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4275 * be relied upon.
4276 *
4277 * @{
4278 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004279
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004280/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004281CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004282CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4283 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004284 const char **endBuf,
4285 unsigned *startLine,
4286 unsigned *startColumn,
4287 unsigned *endLine,
4288 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004289CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004290CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4291 unsigned stack_size);
4292
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004293/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004294 * @}
4295 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004296
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004297/**
4298 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4299 *
4300 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4301 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4302 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4303 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4304 * routines provide support for code completion.
4305 *
4306 * @{
4307 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004308
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004309/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004310 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4311 *
4312 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4313 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4314 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4315 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4316 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4317 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4318 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4319 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004320 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004321 */
4322typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004323
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004324/**
4325 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4326 */
4327typedef struct {
4328 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004329 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004330 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004331 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004332 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4333 * referring to.
4334 *
4335 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4336 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4337 */
4338 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004339
4340 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004341 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4342 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4343 */
4344 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4345} CXCompletionResult;
4346
4347/**
4348 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4349 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004350 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4351 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004352 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4353 */
4354enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4355 /**
4356 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4357 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4358 *
4359 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004360 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004361 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4362 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4363 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4364 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4365 *
4366 * \code
4367 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4368 * \endcode
4369 *
4370 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4371 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4372 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4373 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4374 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4375 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004376 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004377 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4378 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4379 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4380 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4381 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004382 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004383 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4384 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4385 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4386 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4387 */
4388 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4389 /**
4390 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004391 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004392 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004393 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4394 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004395 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4396 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4397 * chunk.
4398 */
4399 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4400 /**
4401 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4402 *
4403 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4404 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4405 * be selected.
4406 */
4407 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4408 /**
4409 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4410 *
4411 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4412 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4413 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4414 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4415 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4416 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4417 */
4418 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4419 /**
4420 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4421 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004422 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004423 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4424 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4425 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4426 * by code completion.
4427 */
4428 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4429 /**
4430 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4431 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4432 *
4433 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4434 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4435 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4436 *
4437 * \code
4438 * int add(int x, int y);
4439 * \endcode
4440 *
4441 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4442 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4443 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4444 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004445 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004446 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4447 */
4448 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4449 /**
4450 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4451 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4452 */
4453 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4454 /**
4455 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4456 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4457 */
4458 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4459 /**
4460 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4461 */
4462 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4463 /**
4464 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4465 */
4466 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4467 /**
4468 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4469 */
4470 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4471 /**
4472 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4473 */
4474 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4475 /**
4476 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4477 */
4478 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4479 /**
4480 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4481 */
4482 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4483 /**
4484 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4485 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004486 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4487 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004488 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004489 *
4490 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004491 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004492 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4493 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004494 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4495 /**
4496 * \brief A colon (':').
4497 */
4498 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4499 /**
4500 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4501 */
4502 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4503 /**
4504 * \brief An '=' sign.
4505 */
4506 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4507 /**
4508 * Horizontal space (' ').
4509 */
4510 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4511 /**
4512 * Vertical space ('\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
4513 * perform indentation.
4514 */
4515 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004516};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004517
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004518/**
4519 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4520 *
4521 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4522 *
4523 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4524 *
4525 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4526 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004527CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004528clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4529 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004530
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004531/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004532 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004533 * completion string.
4534 *
4535 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4536 *
4537 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4538 *
4539 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4540 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004541CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004542clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4543 unsigned chunk_number);
4544
4545/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004546 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004547 * within a completion string.
4548 *
4549 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4550 *
4551 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4552 *
4553 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004554 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004555 */
4556CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4557clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4558 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004559
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004560/**
4561 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4562 */
4563CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4564clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4565
4566/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004567 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4568 *
4569 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4570 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4571 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4572 *
4573 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4574 *
4575 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4576 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4577 */
4578CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4579clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4580
4581/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004582 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4583 * string refers to.
4584 *
4585 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4586 *
4587 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4588 */
4589CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4590clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4591
4592/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004593 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4594 * completion string.
4595 *
4596 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4597 *
4598 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4599 * string.
4600 */
4601CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4602clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4603
4604/**
4605 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
4606 *
4607 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4608 *
4609 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
4610 * completion string.
4611 *
4612 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
4613 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
4614 */
4615CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4616clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4617 unsigned annotation_number);
4618
4619/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004620 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
4621 *
4622 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
4623 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
4624 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
4625 * or protocol as its context.
4626 *
4627 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
4628 * being queried.
4629 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00004630 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004631 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004632 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004633 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
4634 */
4635CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4636clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4637 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004638
4639/**
4640 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
4641 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
4642 */
4643CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4644clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4645
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004646/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00004647 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
4648 * definition cursor.
4649 *
4650 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
4651 *
4652 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
4653 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
4654 */
4655CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4656clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
4657
4658/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004659 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
4660 *
4661 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00004662 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004663 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
4664 */
4665typedef struct {
4666 /**
4667 * \brief The code-completion results.
4668 */
4669 CXCompletionResult *Results;
4670
4671 /**
4672 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
4673 * \c Results array.
4674 */
4675 unsigned NumResults;
4676} CXCodeCompleteResults;
4677
4678/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004679 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
4680 * modify its behavior.
4681 *
4682 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
4683 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4684 */
4685enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
4686 /**
4687 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
4688 * completions returned.
4689 */
4690 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
4691
4692 /**
4693 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
4694 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
4695 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004696 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
4697
4698 /**
4699 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
4700 * completions returned.
4701 */
4702 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004703};
4704
4705/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004706 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
4707 *
4708 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
4709 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
4710 */
4711enum CXCompletionContext {
4712 /**
4713 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
4714 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
4715 */
4716 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
4717
4718 /**
4719 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
4720 */
4721 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
4722
4723 /**
4724 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
4725 * should be included in the results.
4726 */
4727 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
4728 /**
4729 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
4730 * be included in the results.
4731 */
4732 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
4733 /**
4734 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
4735 * should be included in the results.
4736 */
4737 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
4738 /**
4739 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
4740 * included in the results.
4741 */
4742 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
4743
4744 /**
4745 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
4746 * operator should be included in the results.
4747 */
4748 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
4749 /**
4750 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
4751 * operator should be included in the results.
4752 */
4753 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
4754 /**
4755 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
4756 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
4757 */
4758 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
4759
4760 /**
4761 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
4762 */
4763 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
4764 /**
4765 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
4766 */
4767 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
4768 /**
4769 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
4770 */
4771 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
4772
4773 /**
4774 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
4775 */
4776 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
4777 /**
4778 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
4779 * included in the results.
4780 */
4781 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
4782 /**
4783 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
4784 * the results.
4785 */
4786 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
4787
4788 /**
4789 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
4790 * in the results.
4791 */
4792 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
4793 /**
4794 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
4795 * the results.
4796 */
4797 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
4798 /**
4799 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
4800 * the results.
4801 */
4802 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
4803 /**
4804 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
4805 * in the results.
4806 */
4807 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
4808 /**
4809 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
4810 * the results.
4811 */
4812 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
4813 /**
4814 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
4815 * the results.
4816 */
4817 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
4818
4819 /**
4820 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
4821 * the results.
4822 */
4823 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
4824
4825 /**
4826 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
4827 */
4828 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
4829
4830 /**
4831 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
4832 */
4833 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
4834};
4835
4836/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004837 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
4838 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4839 */
4840CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
4841
4842/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004843 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
4844 *
4845 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
4846 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
4847 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
4848 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
4849 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
4850 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
4851 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
4852 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
4853 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
4854 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
4855 *
4856 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
4857 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
4858 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
4859 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
4860 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
4861 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
4862 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
4863 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
4864 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
4865 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
4866 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
4867 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
4868 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
4869 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
4870 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
4871 * have a lower latency.
4872 *
4873 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
4874 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
4875 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
4876 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
4877 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
4878 *
4879 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
4880 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
4881 * included in the translation unit.
4882 *
4883 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
4884 *
4885 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
4886 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
4887 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
4888 *
4889 * \param unsaved_files the Tiles that have not yet been saved to disk
4890 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
4891 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
4892 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
4893 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
4894 * this function returns.
4895 *
4896 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
4897 * unsaved_files.
4898 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004899 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
4900 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
4901 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
4902 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
4903 * of code-completion options.
4904 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004905 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
4906 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
4907 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
4908 * completion fails, returns NULL.
4909 */
4910CINDEX_LINKAGE
4911CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4912 const char *complete_filename,
4913 unsigned complete_line,
4914 unsigned complete_column,
4915 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004916 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
4917 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004918
4919/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00004920 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
4921 * order.
4922 *
4923 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
4924 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
4925 */
4926CINDEX_LINKAGE
4927void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
4928 unsigned NumResults);
4929
4930/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004931 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
4932 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004933CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004934void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004935
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00004936/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004937 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
4938 * location where code completion was performed.
4939 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004940CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004941unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
4942
4943/**
4944 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
4945 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004946 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004947 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
4948 *
4949 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
4950 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
4951 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004952CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004953CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
4954 unsigned Index);
4955
4956/**
Nico Weberdd9c19f2014-04-24 03:06:18 +00004957 * \brief Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004958 * the given code completion.
4959 *
4960 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4961 *
4962 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
4963 * along with the given code completion results.
4964 */
4965CINDEX_LINKAGE
4966unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
4967 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00004968
4969/**
4970 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
4971 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
4972 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
4973 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
4974 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
4975 *
4976 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4977 *
4978 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
4979 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
4980 * information, this value will be true.
4981 *
4982 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
4983 * container
4984 */
4985CINDEX_LINKAGE
4986enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
4987 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
4988 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
4989
4990/**
4991 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
4992 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
4993 * function will return the empty string.
4994 *
4995 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4996 *
4997 * \returns the USR for the container
4998 */
4999CINDEX_LINKAGE
5000CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005001
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00005002
5003/**
5004 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
5005 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
5006 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
5007 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
5008 *
5009 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5010 *
5011 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
5012 * for an Objective-C message send.
5013 */
5014CINDEX_LINKAGE
5015CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5016
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005017/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005018 * @}
5019 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005020
5021
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005022/**
5023 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
5024 *
5025 * @{
5026 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00005027
5028/**
5029 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
5030 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
5031 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00005032CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005033
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005034
5035/**
5036 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5037 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005038 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5039 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005040 */
5041CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5042
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005043 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005044 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005045 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5046 *
5047 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005048 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005049 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5050 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5051 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5052 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5053 */
5054typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5055 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5056 unsigned include_len,
5057 CXClientData client_data);
5058
5059/**
5060 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5061 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5062 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5063 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5064 */
5065CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5066 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5067 CXClientData client_data);
5068
5069/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005070 * @}
5071 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005072
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005073/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5074 *
5075 * @{
5076 */
5077
5078/**
5079 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5080 */
5081typedef void *CXRemapping;
5082
5083/**
5084 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5085 *
5086 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5087 *
5088 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5089 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5090 */
5091CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5092
5093/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005094 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5095 *
5096 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5097 *
5098 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5099 *
5100 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5101 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5102 */
5103CINDEX_LINKAGE
5104CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5105 unsigned numFiles);
5106
5107/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005108 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5109 */
5110CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5111
5112/**
5113 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5114 *
5115 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5116 *
5117 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5118 * is associated with.
5119 */
5120CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5121 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5122
5123/**
5124 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5125 */
5126CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5127
5128/**
5129 * @}
5130 */
5131
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005132/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5133 *
5134 * @{
5135 */
5136
5137enum CXVisitorResult {
5138 CXVisit_Break,
5139 CXVisit_Continue
5140};
5141
5142typedef struct {
5143 void *context;
5144 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5145} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5146
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005147typedef enum {
5148 /**
5149 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5150 */
5151 CXResult_Success = 0,
5152 /**
5153 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5154 */
5155 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5156 /**
5157 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5158 * CXVisit_Break)
5159 */
5160 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5161
5162} CXResult;
5163
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005164/**
5165 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5166 *
5167 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5168 *
5169 * \param file to search for references.
5170 *
5171 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5172 * each reference found.
5173 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5174 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005175 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005176 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005177 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005178CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5179 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005180
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005181/**
5182 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5183 *
5184 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5185 *
5186 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5187 *
5188 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5189 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005190 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005191 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005192 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005193CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5194 CXFile file,
5195 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005196
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005197#ifdef __has_feature
5198# if __has_feature(blocks)
5199
5200typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5201 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5202
5203CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005204CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5205 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005206
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005207CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005208CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5209 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005210
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005211# endif
5212#endif
5213
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005214/**
5215 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5216 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005217typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005218
5219/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005220 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5221 */
5222typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5223
5224/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005225 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5226 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005227 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005228typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005229
5230/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005231 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5232 * or module).
5233 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005234typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005235
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005236/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005237 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005238 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005239typedef struct {
5240 void *ptr_data[2];
5241 unsigned int_data;
5242} CXIdxLoc;
5243
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005244/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005245 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005246 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005247typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005248 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005249 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005250 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005251 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005252 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005253 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005254 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005255 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005256 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005257 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005258 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005259 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005260 int isImport;
5261 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005262 /**
5263 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5264 * import.
5265 */
5266 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005267} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5268
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005269/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005270 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005271 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005272typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005273 /**
5274 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5275 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005276 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005277 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005278 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5279 */
5280 CXModule module;
5281 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005282 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005283 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005284 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005285 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005286 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005287 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005288 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005289 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005290
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005291} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5292
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005293typedef enum {
5294 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5295 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5296 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5297 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5298 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5299 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5300
5301 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5302 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5303 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5304
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005305 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5306 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5307 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5308 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005309
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005310 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5311 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5312 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005313
5314 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5315 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5316 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5317 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5318 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5319 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005320 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5321 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5322 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5323 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5324 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5325
5326} CXIdxEntityKind;
5327
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005328typedef enum {
5329 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5330 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5331 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
5332 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3
5333} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5334
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005335/**
5336 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5337 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5338 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5339 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5340 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5341 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5342 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5343 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5344 */
5345typedef enum {
5346 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5347 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5348 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5349 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5350} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5351
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005352typedef enum {
5353 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5354 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5355 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5356 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5357} CXIdxAttrKind;
5358
5359typedef struct {
5360 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5361 CXCursor cursor;
5362 CXIdxLoc loc;
5363} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5364
5365typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005366 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5367 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5368 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5369 const char *name;
5370 const char *USR;
5371 CXCursor cursor;
5372 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5373 unsigned numAttributes;
5374} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5375
5376typedef struct {
5377 CXCursor cursor;
5378} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5379
5380typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005381 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5382 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5383 CXCursor classCursor;
5384 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5385} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5386
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005387typedef enum {
5388 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5389} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5390
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005391typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005392 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005393 CXCursor cursor;
5394 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005395 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5396 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005397 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005398 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5399 */
5400 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005401 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005402 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005403 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005404 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005405 /**
5406 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005407 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005408 */
5409 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005410 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5411 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005412
5413 unsigned flags;
5414
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005415} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005416
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005417typedef enum {
5418 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5419 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5420 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5421} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005422
5423typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005424 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005425 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5426} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005427
5428typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005429 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5430 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005431 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005432} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005433
5434typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005435 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5436 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005437 CXIdxLoc loc;
5438} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5439
5440typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005441 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005442 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005443} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005444
5445typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005446 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5447 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5448 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5449} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005450
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005451typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005452 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5453 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5454 CXCursor classCursor;
5455 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5456 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5457} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5458
5459typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005460 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005461 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5462 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5463} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5464
5465typedef struct {
5466 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005467 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5468 unsigned numBases;
5469} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5470
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005471/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005472 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005473 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005474typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005475 /**
5476 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5477 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005478 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005479 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005480 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
5481 * via the dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005482 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005483 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005484} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5485
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005486/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005487 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005488 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005489typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005490 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005491 /**
5492 * \brief Reference cursor.
5493 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005494 CXCursor cursor;
5495 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005496 /**
5497 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5498 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005499 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005500 /**
5501 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5502 *
5503 * \code
5504 * Foo *var;
5505 * \endcode
5506 *
5507 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005508 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5509 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005510 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005511 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005512 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005513 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005514 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005515 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005516} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5517
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005518/**
5519 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5520 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5521 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005522typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005523 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005524 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5525 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5526 */
5527 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5528
5529 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005530 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005531 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005532 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005533 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005534
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005535 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005536 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005537
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005538 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005539 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005540 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005541 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005542 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005543
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005544 /**
5545 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
5546 *
5547 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
5548 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005549 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
5550 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005551 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005552 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005553 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005554
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005555 /**
5556 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
5557 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005558 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005559 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005560
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005561 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005562 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005563
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005564 /**
5565 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
5566 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005567 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005568 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005569
5570} IndexerCallbacks;
5571
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005572CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005573CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
5574clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005575
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005576CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
5577clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5578
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005579CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005580const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
5581clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5582
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005583CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
5584clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005585
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005586CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
5587clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5588
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005589CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
5590clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
5591
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005592CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
5593clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5594
5595/**
5596 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5597 * container.
5598 */
5599CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
5600clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
5601
5602/**
5603 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5604 * container.
5605 */
5606CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5607clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
5608
5609/**
5610 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5611 */
5612CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
5613clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
5614
5615/**
5616 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5617 */
5618CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5619clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
5620
5621/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005622 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5623 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005624 */
5625typedef void *CXIndexAction;
5626
5627/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005628 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5629 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005630 *
5631 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
5632 */
5633CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
5634
5635/**
5636 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
5637 *
5638 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
5639 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
5640 */
5641CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
5642
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005643typedef enum {
5644 /**
5645 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
5646 */
5647 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
5648
5649 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005650 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
5651 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
5652 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005653 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00005654 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
5655
5656 /**
5657 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
5658 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
5659 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00005660 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
5661
5662 /**
5663 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
5664 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
5665 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00005666 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
5667
5668 /**
5669 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
5670 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005671 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
5672
5673 /**
5674 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005675 * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005676 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
5677 */
5678 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
5679
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005680} CXIndexOptFlags;
5681
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005682/**
5683 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005684 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005685 *
5686 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5687 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
5688 *
5689 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
5690 * implements.
5691 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005692 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005693 * passed in index_callbacks.
5694 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005695 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
5696 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005697 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005698 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
5699 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005700 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005701 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005702 * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005703 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005704 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005705 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005706 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005707CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005708 CXClientData client_data,
5709 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5710 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
5711 unsigned index_options,
5712 const char *source_filename,
5713 const char * const *command_line_args,
5714 int num_command_line_args,
5715 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5716 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5717 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
5718 unsigned TU_options);
5719
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005720/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00005721 * \brief Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line
5722 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
5723 * library paths are relative to the binary.
5724 */
5725CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv(
5726 CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5727 unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
5728 const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
5729 int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5730 unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
5731
5732/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005733 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005734 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005735 *
5736 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
5737 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
5738 *
5739 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
5740 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
5741 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
5742 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005743 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005744 *
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005745 * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005746 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
5747 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005748CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005749 CXClientData client_data,
5750 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5751 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005752 unsigned index_options,
5753 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005754
5755/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005756 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
5757 * the given CXIdxLoc.
5758 *
5759 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
5760 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
5761 * retrieves the location of the argument.
5762 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005763CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005764 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005765 CXFile *file,
5766 unsigned *line,
5767 unsigned *column,
5768 unsigned *offset);
5769
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005770/**
5771 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
5772 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005773CINDEX_LINKAGE
5774CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
5775
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005776/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00005777 * \brief Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
5778 *
5779 * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
5780 * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
5781 * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
5782 * \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5783 *
5784 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
5785 * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5786 */
5787typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
5788 CXClientData client_data);
5789
5790/**
5791 * \brief Visit the fields of a particular type.
5792 *
5793 * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
5794 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
5795 * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
5796 * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5797 *
5798 * \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
5799 *
5800 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
5801 * field of \p T.
5802 *
5803 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5804 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
5805 *
5806 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
5807 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5808 */
5809CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T,
5810 CXFieldVisitor visitor,
5811 CXClientData client_data);
5812
5813
5814/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005815 * @}
5816 */
5817
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00005818/**
5819 * @}
5820 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005821
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00005822#ifdef __cplusplus
5823}
5824#endif
5825#endif
5826